M2
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW M2.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new
BMW M2. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehi‐
cle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that
will help you make full use of the technical features available in
your BMW M2. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contrib‐
ute to maintaining the value of your BMW M2.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 II/16, 03 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 210.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
27 Voice activation system
30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
34 Opening and closing
49 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
79 Displays
93 Lights
98 Safety
114 Driving stability control systems
119 Driving comfort
127 Climate control
134 Interior equipment
143 Storage compartments
Driving tips
150 BMW M2 Technology
152 Things to remember when driving
156 Loading
159 Saving fuel
Mobility
164 Refueling
166 Fuel
168 Wheels and tires
177 Engine compartment
179 Engine oil
182 Coolant
184 Maintenance
186 Replacing components
193 Breakdown assistance
199 Care
Reference
206 Technical data
208 Appendix
210 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can also be called up via the
following media:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Internet
Information on BMW, for example, on technol‐
ogy, is available on the Internet:
www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available
in many countries as an app. Ad‐
ditional information on the Inter‐
net:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, for example, because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stand‐
ards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, for example,
wheel rotation speed/vehicle speed, decel‐
eration, transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for example, lights and
brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, for ex‐
ample, repair services, service processes, war‐
ranty claims, quality assurance, this technical
information can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, for example, an accident report, dam‐
age to the vehicle, eye witness accounts —
possibly with the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e. g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Power windows 45
2 Exterior mirror operation 57
3 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 144
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 105
Lane departure warning 111
4 Lights
Lights off
Daytime running lights 95
Parking lights 93
Low beams 93
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 94
Adaptive Light Control 95
High-beam Assistant 95
Instrument lighting 96
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 70
High beams, head‐
light flasher 70
High-beam Assistant 95
Roadside parking lights 93
Onboard computer 88
6 M double-clutch transmission: shift pad‐
dles 75
7 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 119
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 79
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation 27
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 88
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 66
Auto Start/Stop function 67
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 71
Rain sensor 72
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 72
12 Horn, total area
13 Steering wheel heating 60
14 Adjust the steering wheel 59
15 Unlock hood 177
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18
2 Glove compartment 143
3 Ventilation 132
4 Hazard warning system 193
Central locking system 40
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
6 Climate control 127
7 Controller with buttons 19
8 Parking brake 70
9 Driving Dynamics Control 116
Dynamic Stability Control 114
10 M double-clutch transmission, selector
lever 75
Manual transmission, selector lever 74
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Overview of control elements
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Information
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, for example due to in‐
tense solar radiation, the brightness may
be reduced down to complete deactiva‐
tion. Once the temperature is reduced, for
example through shadow or climate control
system, the normal functions are re-estab‐
lished.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on Controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on Controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple, "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, for example,
"Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can
overlap.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the Controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for example, "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for example, for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for example, "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entry, it may be necessary to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or
Internet sites.
Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive
map or Internet sites.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open
a link in the Internet.
Tap once.
Changing settings
You may change Control Display settings, for
example the volume, via touchpad. Swipe left
or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller to set the hours and
press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes and
press the Controller.
Additional information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Check the current vehicle position.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, for example, infor‐
mation from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for example, radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Without navigation system and
telephone
On the buttons, only radio stations can be
stored.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for example, that the number is di‐
aled when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for example Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
On the Control Display:
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the Controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip Controller up.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Without navigation system
Select symbol.
Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
on the Control Display.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 92.
Using voice activation
Using the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E.g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, for example, ›Vehicle
status‹.
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
vation system can be called up via the Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual on the Control Display.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: opening the
tone settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 193, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the Controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the Controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the Controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be displayed di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1.
Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 43.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 36.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 184
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The driver's door can be unlocked and locked
without remote control, refer to page 39, us‐
ing the integrated key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐
tains a switch for separately securing the tail‐
gate, refer to page 41.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Replacing the battery
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key.
3. Remove battery compartment cover, ar‐
row 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote
control
The concept
The engine can be started via emergency de‐
tection of the remote control, if the remote
control is not recognized by the vehicle.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, e.g.,
charging of a mobile phone.
Starting the engine
1.
Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Personal Profile
The concept
Using Personal Profile, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up
again at a later time.
General information
There are three profiles with which personal
vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote
control has one of these profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the profile currently activated.
If another profile is selected via iDrive, the set‐
tings saved in it will be applied automatically.
The new profile is assigned to the remote con‐
trol currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal profiles.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
About iDrive:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, for example. Profiles can be
taken to another vehicle equipped with the
Personal Profile function.
The following export options are available:
▷ Via BMW Online.
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.
Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Using the remote control
Information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 43,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
switched on. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched off.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
being locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched on.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when
it is dark outside. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 45, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
whether the vehicle was previously locked or
unlocked.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
locked again as soon as it closes.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
From the outside
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
ATTENTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the inte‐
grated key inserted, paint or key can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of damage to property.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
From the inside
Unlocking and locking
Pressing the central locking system button
locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors
closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system button to
unlock the doors together, and then pull
the door handle above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Tailgate
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
During opening, the tailgate pivots back and
up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press button on the tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Using the remote control, refer to
page 38.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle is stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area.
The tailgate is unlocked and opens slightly.
Closing
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the tail‐
gate make it easier to pull down the lid.
Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately with the
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
compartment is locked, the tailgate cannot be
opened.
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the tailgate and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The remote control can be
handed out without the integrated key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
ing the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all power consumers are deactivated be‐
fore locking the vehicle.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button
on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Separately unlocking the tailgate
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The situation of the doors does not change.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 34.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
Doors
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on and off
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is switched on and off
at the same time.
Door lock with the alarm system
switched on
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 45.
Tailgate with the alarm system
switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Indicator lamp on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Power windows
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
Closing
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 41.
Pinch protection system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window opens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain threshold.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Glass sunroof, powered
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. The sliding visor can
be manually closed.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Additional options:
▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 38, via
the remote control.
▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer
to page 41.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing. The glass
sunroof reopens slightly.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof is completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position meeting the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54.
▷ Airbags.
Seats
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the Function is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Entering the rear
Information
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injuries. Fold back and lock the
backrests before driving.◀
Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
1.
Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Electric forward/backward adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to the de‐
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐
tomatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Original position
1.
Moving the seat to its original position:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to its original
position. Releasing the button stops
window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
2. Folding the backrest back.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
safety belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed in an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
respectively secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the seat belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of in‐
jury or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Front headrests
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a a risk of injury. Install
head restraints on occupied seats prior to driv‐
ing and make sure that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Rear head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a a risk of injury. Install
head restraints on occupied seats prior to driv‐
ing and make sure that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Folding down head restraints
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Seat and mirror memory
The concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile and called up. Set‐
tings for the backrest width and lumbar sup‐
port are not stored in memory.
Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
General information
There are two ways to call up the memory
function:
▷ Comfort function.
▷ Safety function.
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. If necessary, switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
1 Adjusting 58
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 58
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored via the seat and mirror memory.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
ATTENTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of damage to property. Before wash‐
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the but‐
ton.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is advantageous
in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells are used to con‐
trol the Interior mirror.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
rear view mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Adjusting
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 60
Controls Adjusting
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The right place for children
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g., in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Secure
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐
ble restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐
cordance with the age, weight and size of the
child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 100.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 100.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
Information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐
bols. Use of inner lower anchors from
standard outboard LATCH positions to
install a child restraint system in the center is
not recommended. For the center position,
use the vehicle seat belt instead.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint system with a tether
strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Information
ATTENTION
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
Seite 63
Transporting children safely Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
erty. Only mount child restraint systems to the
upper retaining straps.◀
Retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
M double-clutch transmission:
the engine starts with the brake
pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop
button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, and do not press on the brake
pedal at the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again without stepping on the
brake.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Information
When switching off the ignition, the transmis‐
sion position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for ex‐
ample, the ignition is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
ATTENTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
M double-clutch transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Engine stop
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 199.
M double-clutch transmission
Switching off the engine
1. Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to
a stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for example, in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
The Auto Start/Stop function is only available
in the COMFORT or TRACTION driving pro‐
grams, refer to page 116.
Information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph,
approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
M double-clutch transmission:
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ M double-clutch transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Double-clutch transmission: Change from
selector lever position D to N, R or D/S.
▷ M double-clutch transmission: Accelerat‐
ing while simultaneously applying the
brake.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐
pressed a number of times in succession.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with aM double-clutch transmission
The concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐
gine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill:
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
M double-clutch transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, as it is detected that no driver is present.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Parking brake
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into its starting
position after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
ATTENTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switching off and brief wipe
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior mirror.
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
ATTENTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to property.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
ATTENTION
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Important, when changing the wiper blades or
when folding out under frosty conditions, for
example.
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
4. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Prepare a mixture of tap water, windshield
washer concentrate, and possibly antifreeze
prior to filling.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
ATTENTION
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not add silicon-containing additives to
the washer fluid.◀
ATTENTION
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers.◀
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+ 5 ℉/- 15 ℃.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Manual transmission
Information
CAUTION
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Shifting
General information
The engine speed during a shifting operation is
adjusted automatically for harmonious and dy‐
namic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the selector
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐
verse gear.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
M double-clutch
transmission with Drivelogic
General information
The M double-clutch transmission with Drive‐
logic is an automatic shift transmission with
two clutches and partial transmissions in which
the gears can be changed without interrupting
the tractive force.
The operation is via the selector lever or two
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection
from misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever, selector lever positions
Overview
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷ Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and se‐
quential mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the
selector lever in the corresponding direction.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the
selector lever locks.
The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster and on the se‐
lector lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehi‐
cle may start rolling, after the brake is released,
for example on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off
immediately after releasing the brake.
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuver‐
ing and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
The concept
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, switch between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Information
CAUTION
When using the function and simultane‐
ously stepping on the brake pedal for a longer
time, the transmission can overheat. There is a
risk of property damage. When using the func‐
tion, do not brake for a longer period.◀
Activating
1.
Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle rolls at minimum speed.
This is possible in 1st and 2nd gear and in re‐
verse gear.
Deactivating
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
Flashing display on the selector lever
of the double clutch transmission
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
some situations. The display in the selector
lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster
in these cases.
D is Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati‐
cally changed.
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, e.g.
when passing. To do this, depress the acceler‐
ator pedal past the resistance point.
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or push the
selector lever in the D/S direction.
S is Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to
upshift or downshift without letting off the gas.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-de‐
pendent minimum speed, the transmission
is automatically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if
the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
For example, there is no downshifting if the
engine speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the
kickdown and the left shift paddle or selec‐
tor lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear,
for example, on icy roads.
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in
D/S direction.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, switch between
forward gear and reverse gear without step‐
ping on the brakes in the process.
N Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N, for example, in car washes, refer to
page 199.
P is Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio-ready state, refer to page 65, or if
the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, and if position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Information
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever
position.
Gear change
General information
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se‐
quential mode.
Using the selector lever
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Drivelogic
The concept
Using Drivelogic, the characteristics of the hy‐
brid system can be adjusted. For this purpose,
different driving programs are available in Drive
and Sequential mode.
The driving programs can be programmed us‐
ing Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Driving programs
Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ COMFORT: efficient driving.
▷ SPORT: sporty driving.
▷ SPORT+: consistently sporty driving.
Sequential mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ COMFORT: comfortable shifting opera‐
tions.
▷ SPORT: sporty, fast shifting operations.
▷ SPORT+: maximum shifting speed, Launch
Control, refer to page 78.
Activating
Activate program via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 116, button.
Seite 77
Driving Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Launch Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 152, period.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Activate Launch Control
1.
Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer
to page 114.
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1.
3. With the engine running, apply the brake
with the left foot.
4. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
5. If necessary, change the starting engine
speed by 500 rpm via cruise control.
6. Release the brake, the vehicle accelerates.
Continue to depress the accelerator pedal.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
Launch Control is available again only after a
certain distance has been driven.
System limits
This transmission has an overheating protec‐
tion mechanism, which protects the clutch
from extreme stress.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up yellow:
transmission too hot.
Avoid high engine stress and fre‐
quent starts.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up red: transmission
is overheating.
Further driving at a moderate pace is pos‐
sible. At the next opportunity, stop the car,
shut off the engine and allow the transmis‐
sion to cool down.
Avoid fast starts, and on inclines did not accel‐
erate lightly while letting the clutch slip; other‐
wise, the transmission may overheat.
During traffic jams or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to page 75.
Seite 78
Controls Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Messages, for example, Check Control
3 Tachometer 83
4 Current fuel consumption
5 Electronic displays 79
6 Fuel gauge 83
7 Reset miles 83
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 88.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 84.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 68.
▷ Onboard computer, refer to page 88.
▷ Date, refer to page 84.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 84.
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 83.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to
page 80.
▷ Range, refer to page 84.
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 116.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 85.
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 86.
▷ Time, refer to page 84.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the
driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake, brake system
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 70.
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐
sible. Braking force boost may not be
working. Take into account the longer
brake distance. Have the system im‐
mediately checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
style to the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 114.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched off.
For additional information, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control DSC, refer to
page 114.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
For more information, see M Dynamic
Mode, refer to page 115.
Additional flashing: MDM controls the
drive and brake forces. The vehicle is
stabilized.
Illuminated: MDM failed. Have the sys‐
tem checked by a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
For more information, see M Dynamic Mode,
refer to page 115.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 104.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 101.
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 185.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 111.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 70.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 95.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 71.
General lamps
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
check control message.
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Information on refueling, refer to page 164.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g., on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for example
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
ATTENTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
Energy recovery
Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while Coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
EfficientDynamics display
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Service requirements
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequen‐
tial mode of the M double clutch transmission
and for the manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Manual transmission: displaying
Symbol Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Symbol Description
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Shift into neutral.
M double-clutch transmission:
displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera in the area of the interior mir‐
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road
as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc. are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the
rain sensor, and will be displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the CID (central information
display) in the instrument cluster via the on‐
board computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection not availa‐
ble.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs are detected valid for a parallel
road.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
ment cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
Onboard computer
Calling up information on the info
display
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
CID (central information display)
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
CID (central information display):
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and engine
oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 182.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Further information, see chapter Speed limit
detection.
Trip onboard computer
The vehicle features two types of onboard
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip onboard computer
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip onboard
computer on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
Speed warning is stored.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the Controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness.
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Activating/deactivating display of the
current vehicle position
If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐
tedDrive customer portal.
1. "Settings"
2. "GPS tracking"
3. "GPS tracking"
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Automatic headlamp control
Adaptive Light Control
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Symbol Function
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 93.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Roadside parking lights
The concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 93
Lights Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position
or .
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic headlamp control
The concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
illuminated, when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
Seite 94
Controls Lights
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
E.g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 95.
Activating
Position of switch
with the ignition
switched on.
Cornering lights
The cornering lights are automatically
switched on depending on the steering angle
or the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering angle.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when‐
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for example, in towns
and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Seite 95
Lights Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Activating
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated, when the low
beams are switched on.
The high beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 71. To reactivate the High-beam
Assistant, press the button on the turn signal
lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Seite 96
Controls Lights
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Switching the reading lamps on and
off manually
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lamps activated they light up in the line's color
when vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 97
Lights Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for example, in less severe accidents or
rear-end collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow
the information on optimum protective effect
of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no persons, animals or
objects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
Seite 99
Safety Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 100
Controls Safety
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the long-
term.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Seite 101
Safety Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 168.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, for example, whether or not the TPM is
active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a
malfunction.
Additional information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
the Mobility System. To correct the tire in‐
flation pressure.
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed in the
following situations
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for example, a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, for exam‐
ple, whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
the Mobility System. If the tire inflation
pressure in all tires is correct, the Flat Tire
Monitor may not have been initialized. In
this case, initialize the system.
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 106.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 109.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. However, there may also be
an excess of false warnings.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Person warning with City
light braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 inches/80 cm.
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for example DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release the driver
from the personal responsibility to correctly
assess route and traffic situation. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations. In
the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
jerk the steering wheel.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐
tom brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the top
brake lights light up in addition.
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for example, on highways. In this situa‐
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
tion, it is recommended that the driver takes a
break.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that decreasing alertness
or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐
ing behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g. in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detect for example
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Information
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 114
Controls Driving stability control systems
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds, until the indica‐
tor lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
The concept
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on
a dry roadway with high longitudinal and trans‐
verse acceleration but with limited driving sta‐
bility.
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the en‐
gine power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional
steering corrections may be necessary.
You may find it useful to briefly activate MDM
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Information
WARNING
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, sta‐
bilizing interventions are carried out only to a
reduced extent. There is a risk of accidents or
a risk of property damage. Adapt to traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations. In the event of
a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk the steer‐
ing wheel.◀
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Seite 115
Driving stability control systems Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Activating MDM
Press button briefly.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp is illumi‐
nated and TRACTION is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Deactivating MDM
Press button.
DSC OFF indicator lamp and TRACTION
indicator are no longer illuminated.
Indicator/warning lights
Indicator lamp is illuminated and
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
DSC indicator lamp also flashes:
M Dynamic Mode controls the drive
forces and brake forces.
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has failed.
Active M differential
The concept
The active M differential assures continuously
variable locking of the rear axle differential de‐
pending on the driving situation. This prevents
individual rear wheels from spinning even
when DSC is switched off and in M Dynamic
Mode, so that optimum traction is always as‐
sured in all driving situations.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving behavior to the situation.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
▷ COMFORT: low.
▷ SPORT: high.
▷ SPORT+: high.
Selecting a channel
The desired channel is selected using the Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control, refer to page 116.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Seite 116
Controls Driving stability control systems
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Press button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 115, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces.
M Dynamic Mode MDM, refer to page 115, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty driving with optimized
chassis and suspension and adjusted drive‐
train.
M Dynamic Mode is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
SPORT
Sporty tuning of the steering and drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently used.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 118, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
▷ Activating SPORT.
Seite 117
Driving stability control systems Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 117.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
The concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Cruise control
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing, refer to page 119.
Store speed, refer to
page 120.
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 121.
Rocker switch: adjust speed,
refer to page 120.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Seite 119
Driving comfort Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Cruise control can be used.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If MDM is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 121.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 120
Controls Driving comfort
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Information
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear, then the
object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
Seite 121
Driving comfort Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made through ultrasound
sensors in the rear bumper.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the two rear corner sensors at approx.
24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for example in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for example, with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in‐
ches/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera also switches on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1.
"Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Seite 122
Controls Driving comfort
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
6. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for ex‐
ample coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for example from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Low objects already displayed, for example,
curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐
sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for example, in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for exam‐
ple, sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
tem is again fully functional.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 202.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo can lead to mal‐
functions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 52
2 Vent settings
3 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow
5 AUTO program
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right 52
8 Cooling function
9 Recirculated-air mode
10 Interior temperature sensor
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Seite 127
Climate control Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 154, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 128, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Air flow, manual
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Seite 128
Controls Climate control
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Manual air distribution
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Floor area.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 184, of your vehi‐
cle.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 52
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
Seite 129
Climate control Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
7 Seat heating, right 52
8 Cooling function
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
tion
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 154, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Seite 130
Controls Climate control
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The cooling function, refer to page 130, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
area: driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Seite 131
Climate control Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 184.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset activation times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
Seite 132
Controls Climate control
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 133
Climate control Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
The concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote
Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the Universal Inte‐
grated Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 134
Controls Interior equipment
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features an alternating-
code radio system. Flashing and continuous il‐
lumination of the LED will repeat for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code radio
system, the universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Seite 135
Interior equipment Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
idly. All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 136
Controls Interior equipment
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Seite 137
Interior equipment Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Raise cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.,
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
ATTENTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
The cigarette lighter is located in the center
console.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Information
ATTENTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Seite 138
Controls Interior equipment
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
ATTENTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
The concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, e.g. a MP3 player, can
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the USB inter‐
face is located in the center console or in the
glove compartment.
Seite 139
Interior equipment Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
USB interface in the glove
compartment
Mobile storage devices with USB port can be
connected to the USB interface in the glove
compartment.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 36.
▷ Loading of software updates.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and saving the music collection.
USB interface in the center console
In addition to the USB storage devices descri‐
bed above, additional mobile devices with USB
port can be connected to the USB interface in
the center console.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
This allows further uses:
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing video films via USB video.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB device is supplied with
charging current via the USB interface, as‐
suming this is supported by the device.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge an USB device
via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB device should
be used, settings may be required on the
USB device, refer to the owner's manual of
the device.
Not suitable USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
Seite 140
Controls Interior equipment
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Overview
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center armrest.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
With through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided into three parts at a
40/20/40 ratio.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injuries or a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
CAUTION
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Opening
1.
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
Seite 141
Interior equipment Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
2. The unlocked backrest moves forward
slightly.
3. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
ter folding it back.◀
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
To secure cargo, refer to page 157, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐
tion forward.
Seite 142
Controls Interior equipment
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g.,in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
ATTENTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 143.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 144.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 144.
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cup holders,
refer to page 144.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 144.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 145.
▷ With two rear seats: Storage compartment
between the rear seats, refer to page 145.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Seite 143
Storage compartments Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 41, for example.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Front storage compartment
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest in front of the cup holders.
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Seite 144
Controls Storage compartments
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for ex‐
ample, an MP3 player, can be
connected via the AUX-IN port
or the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Storage compartment in the
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the a risk of injury in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Seite 145
Storage compartments Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
ATTENTION
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
Information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
One storage compartment each is located on
the left and right side.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
right storage compartment.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping
bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 157, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
cargo, refer to page 157, and store small
parts.
Seite 146
Controls Storage compartments
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Seite 147
Storage compartments Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
BMW M2 Technology
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
High-performance engine
General information
With a displacement of 3 liters, the high-per‐
formance engine generates a maximum power
of 365 hp and a maximum torque of
343 lb ft/465 Nm with Overboost
369 lb ft/500 Nm. With its spontaneous re‐
sponse behavior, a speed range of wide utility
results. The maximum engine speed is
7,000 rpm and is electronically controlled. Be‐
cause of the high engine dynamics, the maxi‐
mum engine speed with the vehicle stationary
is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the high-
performance engine has a somewhat rougher
running behavior because of the emission con‐
trols.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the na‐
ture of the system.
Overboost
Overboost temporarily increases the maximum
torque to 369 lb ft/500 Nm, for example when
passing.
For this purpose, fully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated compound brake discs.
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. However, this has no effect on per‐
formance, operational reliability and reliability
of the brake.
Correct braking
To keep the brake system in optimum condi‐
tion, it is expedient to apply them at regular in‐
tervals corresponding to the vehicle character.
Drivetrain
With this vehicle, particular value was placed
on the direct connection from engine to the
drivetrain. Due to the torsionally rigid design of
the drivetrain, as is typical in a sports car, the
transmission of the torque also gives acoustic
feedback.
When there are load changes, this may result
in clicking noises. The do not cause any im‐
pairment of the operation or the service life of
the components.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for motorsports com‐
petitive use.
Seite 150
Driving tips BMW M2 Technology
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The standard brake linings and the wear indi‐
cators are not designed for racetrack opera‐
tion.
Seite 151
BMW M2 Technology Driving tips
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is risk of an accident. After
installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive
conservatively and intervene early if necessary.
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐
spective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but
do not exceed 5,500 rpm and
106 mph/170 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance per‐
formed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be
increased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, for example, when passing.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 152
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the
hot exhaust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual disturbance and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
ATTENTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of damage to
property. When driving through water, do not
exceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
Seite 153
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, this has no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions are restricted or
not available anymore, e.g., braking effect of
the engine or braking force and steering sup‐
port. There is risk of an accident. Do not drive
in idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
Manual transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
M double-clutch transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 76.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
Seite 154
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Ground clearance
CAUTION
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler
for example when driving over curbs or enter‐
ing into underground car parking garages.
There is a risk of property damage. Ensure that
there is sufficient ground clearance available.◀
Seite 155
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of
the tires and never exceed the permitted gross
weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g.,in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
ATTENTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 156
Driving tips Loading
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐
ing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure cargo
and store small parts.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Securing cargo
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Seite 157
Loading Driving tips
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Attach the cargo straps, ratchet straps or draw
straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Information
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for exam‐
ple, tie with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 158
Driving tips Loading
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 159
Saving fuel Driving tips
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 86.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
example, at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
in traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 184.
Seite 160
Driving tips Saving fuel
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Seite 161
Saving fuel Driving tips
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 166, prior to refueling.
ATTENTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap may
be jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is a risk
of injury or a risk of property damage. Pay at‐
tention that the retaining strap is not jammed
or crushed when closing the lid.◀
Seite 164
Mobility Refueling
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Observe the following when
refueling
ATTENTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with Painted surfaces may be
damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel
can harm the environment. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 165
Refueling Mobility
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐
ple.
Information
ATTENTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, e.g., poor engine start-up be‐
havior, poor handling and/or poor performance.
There is a risk of damage to property. In case
of engine problems, switch gas stations or use
a brand name fuel with a higher octane rat‐
ing.◀
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Information
ATTENTION
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
line engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
ATTENTION
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use a fuel with a higher
ethanol percentage than recommended or one
with other types of alcohol, e.g., M5 to M100.◀
ATTENTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Seite 166
Mobility Fuel
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 167
Fuel Mobility
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 169, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 169, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 168
Mobility Wheels and tires
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
235/40 R 18 95
V M+S XL Std
2,1 / 30 2.3 / 33
F: 245/35 R 19
93 (Y) XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
R: 265/35 R 19
98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
235/40 R 18 95
V M+S XL Std
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
F: 245/35 R 19
93 (Y) XL Std
2.7 / 39 -
R: 265/35 R 19
98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.9 /42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Seite 169
Wheels and tires Mobility
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0116
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0116: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0116: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2016.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 170
Mobility Wheels and tires
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the right wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Seite 171
Wheels and tires Mobility
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g., due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident. The manufacturer
of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
tire brands. These can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The label is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles. This can impair the handling
characteristics.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Seite 172
Mobility Wheels and tires
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Seite 173
Wheels and tires Mobility
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Compressor
1 Holder for sealant container
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Inflation pressure dial
7 Reduce inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
Seite 174
Mobility Wheels and tires
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
ATTENTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
Seite 175
Wheels and tires Mobility
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or a risk of property damage. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are desig‐
nated by their manufacturer as suitable for the
use of snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 235/40 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed
briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 176
Mobility Wheels and tires
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Coolant reservoir
7 Oil filler neck
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 177
Engine compartment Mobility
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, e.g., the ra‐
diator fan. There is a a risk of injury. Do not
reach into the area of moving parts. Keep arti‐
cles of clothing and hair away from moving
parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g., locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a a
risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention
to protruding parts and keep these areas
clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
ATTENTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 178
Mobility Engine compartment
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as
when cornering fast, the system is unable to
measure the engine oil level. With this driving
style, measure the engine oil level using a de‐
tailed measurement, refer to page 180.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
About iDrive:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
ATTENTION
Too low of an engine oil level causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Seite 179
Engine oil Mobility
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
ATTENTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ M Double clutch transmission: selector
lever in selector lever position N and accel‐
erator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
ATTENTION
Too low of an engine oil level causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
ATTENTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 177.
Seite 180
Mobility Engine oil
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 177.
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
Information
ATTENTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use oil additives.◀
ATTENTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the
correct viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Viscosity grades
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change
ATTENTION
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
dicated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 181
Engine oil Mobility
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 182
Mobility Coolant
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 183
Coolant Mobility
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Information on service requirements can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Seite 184
Mobility Maintenance
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Information
ATTENTION
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 185
Maintenance Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Information
ATTENTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Secure the wiper arm when
replacing the wiper blades and do not fold
down the wipers without the wiper blades in‐
stalled.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 73, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
ATTENTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement
Information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 186
Mobility Replacing components
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or a risk of property damage. When work‐
ing on the lighting system, switch off the lamps
in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manu‐
facturer's instructions.◀
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
CAUTION
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a a risk
of injury. Do not look directly into the head‐
lights or other light sources. Do not remove the
LED covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Xenon headlights
Information
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
Seite 187
Replacing components Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Turn signal
Follow general instructions, refer to page 186.
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 188
Mobility Replacing components
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Top brake lamp
3 Reversing lamp
4 Rear lamp
5 Bottom brake lights
Bulb replacement
Follow general instructions, refer to page 186.
Turn signal, brake, tail, rear or reversing lamp:
21-watt bulb, P21W
Rear fog lamp: 6-watt bulb, H6W.
Removing the tail lamp
1.
Open tailgate.
2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐
move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make
sure that the nuts do not drop into the
bumper area. In addition to the two outer
fasteners, there is another inner fastener.
4. Hold the grip rail in one hand, arrow 1, and
brace against the outside with your other
hand, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail
lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐
leases from the inner fastener.
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Loosen the six fasteners on the tail lamp,
arrows 1, and remove the tail lamp from the
lamp holder, arrow 2.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Seite 189
Replacing components Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder to the
tail lamp. Make sure that the bulb holder
engages in all fasteners.
Installing the tail lamp
1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it
in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches
in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐
serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐
row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does
not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐
row 3, and close covers.
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Follow general instructions, refer to page 186.
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When sealants are used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure in the event of a flat tire is unneces‐
sary.
No spare tire is provided with your vehicle.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Battery replacement
ATTENTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that any
Seite 190
Mobility Replacing components
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
tures are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Information
ATTENTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 195, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system, refer to page 48.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
In the engine compartment
1.
Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.
Seite 191
Replacing components Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Attaching the covers
1.
When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 192
Mobility Replacing components
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent emergency call
The concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the Emergency Request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
Seite 193
Breakdown assistance Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
rectly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
Information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in
the storage compartment.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
Seite 194
Mobility Breakdown assistance
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
ATTENTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is a a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Seite 195
Breakdown assistance Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With rear-wheel drive
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
ATTENTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
M double-clutch transmission:
transporting the vehicle
Information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Seite 196
Mobility Breakdown assistance
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
ATTENTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat‐
form.◀
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
ATTENTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
Towing other vehicles
Information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
ATTENTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the
tow fitting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
Seite 197
Breakdown assistance Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 186, are together in the cargo
area.
Information
ATTENTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
example, do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark of the front cover to push it
out.
Press out the rear cover at the recess using
the screw driver from the onboard vehicle tool
kit.
Tow-starting
M double-clutch transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the M double-clutch transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 194. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 65.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 198
Mobility Breakdown assistance
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Information
ATTENTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic car washes
Information
CAUTION
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
washers.◀
ATTENTION
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Informa‐
tion the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, if necessary, to
avoid damage to the wiper system.◀
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 45.
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Seite 199
Care Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Manual transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
M double-clutch transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
CAUTION
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is
switched off. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not switch ignition off in car
washes.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine with manual transmission:
1.
Press on the clutch pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
To start the engine with a M double clutch
transmission:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
Seite 200
Mobility Care
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for example, with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
ATTENTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
cleaning, use only water and suitable care
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends original BMW care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
ATTENTION
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e. g:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
Seite 201
Care Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/screens
ATTENTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
ATTENTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 202
Mobility Care
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Seite 203
Care Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
BMW M2 Coupe
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.1/1,984
Width without mirrors inches/mm 73/1,854
Height inches/mm 55.5/1,410
Length inches/mm 176.2/4,476
Wheelbase inches/mm 106/2,693
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 38.4/11.7
Seite 206
Reference Technical data
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Weights
M2
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
M double-clutch transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,140/971
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 13.8
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.7/390
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 13.7/52.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 166
Seite 207
Technical data Reference
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Seite 208
Reference Appendix
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Seite 209
Appendix Reference
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 114
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 78
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 132
Activation times, parked-car
ventilation 133
Active M differential 116
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 112
Adaptive Light Control 95
Additional information,
iDrive 23
Additives, oil 181
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 49
After washing vehicle 200
Airbags 98
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 99
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 128, 131
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 128, 130
Air distribution, man‐
ual 129, 131
Air flow, air conditioner 128
Air flow, automatic climate
control 131
Air pressure, tires 168
Air vents, see Ventilation 132
Alarm system 44
Alarm, unintentional 45
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 172
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 135
Alternative oil types 181
Ambient light 97
Antifreeze, washer fluid 73
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 114
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 114
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approved axle load 207
Arrival time 90
Ashtray 138
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 194
Assistance when driving
off 118
Attentiveness assistant 112
AUTO intensity 131
Automatic car wash 199
Automatic climate con‐
trol 127
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 129
Automatic Curb Monitor 58
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 100
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 94
Automatic locking 43
Automatic recirculated-air
control 131
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 130
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 128
AUTO program, intensity 131
Auto Start/Stop function 67
AUX-IN port, general informa‐
tion 139
Average fuel consumption 89
Average speed 89
Axle loads, weights 207
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 51
Backrest, width 52
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 194
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 190
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 35
Battery, vehicle 190
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 196
Belts, safety belts 53
Beverage holder, cup
holder 145
BMW Assist 6
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 184
BMW M technology 150
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 145
Brake assistant 114
Brake discs, break-in 152
Brake force display 112
Brake lights, adaptive 112
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 112
Brake pads, break-in 152
Braking, information 153
Seite 210
Reference Everything from A to Z
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Breakdown assis‐
tance 193, 194
Break-in 152
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 92
Bulb replacement 186
Bulb replacement, front 187
Bulb replacement, rear 189
Bulbs and lights 186
Button, Start/Stop 65
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 194
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 44
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 44
Camera lenses, care 202
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 124
Can holder, see Cup
holder 145
Car battery 190
Care, displays 202
Care, vehicle 200
Cargo 156
Cargo area, enlarging 141
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 146
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 157
Car key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 202
Car wash 199
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 153
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 184
Center armrest 144
Center console 16
Central locking system 40
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 186
Changing wheels 190
Changing wheels/tires 171
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 80
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 179
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 179
Children, seating position 61
Children, transporting
safely 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 63
Child restraint system 61
Child restraint systems,
mounting 62
Child seat, mounting 62
Child seats 61
Chrome parts, care 201
Cigarette lighter 138
Cleaning displays 202
Climate control 127, 129
Clock 84
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 37
Clothes hooks 146
Cockpit 14
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 70
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 71
Comfort Access 41
COMFORT program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 118
Compartments in the
doors 144
Compass 136
Compound brake 150
Compressor 173
Condensation on win‐
dows 131
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 154
Condition Based Service
CBS 184
Confirmation signal 43
ConnectedDrive 6
ConnectedDrive Services 6
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 138
Container for washer fluid 73
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 91
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 114
Convenient opening with the
remote control 38
Coolant 182
Cooling function 128, 130
Cooling, maximum 130
Cooling system 182
Cornering light 95
Corrosion on brake discs 154
Cosmetic mirror 138
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 38
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 119
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 119
Cruising range 84
Cup holder 145
Current fuel consumption 84
D
Damage, tires 171
Data, technical 206
Date 84
Daytime running lights 95
Seite 211
Everything from A to Z Reference
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 129
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 131
Defrosting the windows 129
Dehumidifying, air 128, 130
Deleting personal data 25
Deletion of personal data 25
Destination distance 89
Differential lock 116
Digital clock 84
Digital compass 136
Dimensions 206
Dimmable exterior mirrors 58
Dimmable interior mirror 59
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 70
Display EfficientDynamics 85
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 79
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 89
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 96
Displays, cleaning 202
Disposal, coolant 183
Disposal, vehicle battery 191
Distance control, see
PDC 121
Distance to destination 89
Divided screen view, split
screen 24
Door lock 39
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Double-clutch transmis‐
sion 75
Drivelogic 77
Drive mode 76
Drive-off assistant 118
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 114
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 105
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 105
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
Driving instructions, break-
in 152
Driving mode 116
Driving notes, general 153
Driving on racetracks 150
Driving program, see Drive‐
logic 77
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 114
Driving tips 153
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 114
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 114
E
EfficientDynamics 85
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 79
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 179
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 114
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency Request 193
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 194
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 41
Energy Control 84
Energy recovery 84
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 67
Engine, automatic switch-
off 67
Engine compartment 177
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 177
Engine coolant 182
Engine oil 179
Engine oil, adding 180
Engine oil additives 181
Engine oil change 181
Engine oil filler neck 180
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 181
Engine oil types, suitable 181
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 194
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 66
Engine stop 67
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 89
Entering a car wash 199
Equipment, interior 134
Error displays, see Check
Control 80
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 114
Exchanging wheels/tires 171
Exhaust system 153
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 58
Exterior mirrors 57
External start 194
External temperature dis‐
play 84
External temperature warn‐
ing 84
Eyes for securing cargo 157
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 80
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 45
Fan, see Air flow 128, 131
Filler neck for engine oil 180
Fine wood, care 201
First-aid kit 194
Flat tire, changing
wheels 190
Seite 212
Reference Everything from A to Z
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104
Flat tire, repairing 173
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 101
Flat tire, warning
lamp 102, 105
Flooding 153
Floor carpet, care 202
Floor mats, care 202
Fogged up windows 129
Fold-away position, wiper 73
Fold down the rear seat back‐
rest, see Though-loading
system 141
Foot brake 153
Front airbags 98
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 106
Front lights 187
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 100
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 101
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 104
Fuel 166
Fuel cap 164
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 89
Fuel filler flap 164
Fuel gauge 83
Fuel quality 166
Fuel recommendation 166
Fuel, tank capacity 207
Fuse 191
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 134
Gasoline 166
Gear change 77
Gear shift indicator 86
General driving notes 153
Glare shield 138
Glass sunroof, powered 47
Glove compartment 143
GPS location, vehicle posi‐
tion 92
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 207
Ground clearance 155
H
Handbrake, see parking
brake 70
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 135
Hazard warning flashers 193
Head airbags 98
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 94
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 94
Headlight flasher 71
Headlight glass 187
Headlights 187
Headlights, care 200
Head restraints 49
Head restraints, front 54
Head restraints, rear 55
Heavy cargo, stowing 157
High-beam Assistant 95
High beams 71
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 95
High-performance en‐
gine 150
Hills 154
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 118
Holder for beverages 145
Homepage 6
Hood 177
Horn 14
Hotel function, tailgate 41
Hot exhaust system 153
Hydroplaning 153
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 84
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 84
Identification marks, tires 169
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
iDrive 18
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Ignition off 65
Ignition on 65
Indication of a flat
tire 102, 105
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 80
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 80
Individual air distribu‐
tion 129, 131
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 36
Inflation pressure, tires 168
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 104
Info display, see On-Board
computer 88
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 102
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 104
Instrument cluster 79
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 79
Instrument lighting 96
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 30
Intelligent emergency
call 193
Intelligent Safety 105
Seite 213
Everything from A to Z Reference
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 131
Interior equipment 134
Interior lights 96
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 38
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 59
Interior mirror, compass 136
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 59
Interior motion sensor 45
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 85
Interval mode 72
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 190
Jump-starting 194
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 41
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 36
Knee airbag 99
L
Label on recommended
tires 172
Lamp replacement 186
Lamp replacement, front 187
Lamp replacement, rear 189
Lane departure warning 111
Lane margin, warning 111
Language on Control Dis‐
play 92
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 157
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 63
Launch Control 78
Leather, care 201
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 187
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light 93
Light-alloy wheels, care 201
Light control 95
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 187
Lighting 93
Lights and bulbs 186
Light switch 93
Load 157
Loading 156
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 37
Locking, automatic 43
Locking, settings 43
Locking via tailgate 41
Low beams 93
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 95
Lower back support 51
Low Speed Assistant 75
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 158
Lumbar support 51
M
Maintenance 184
Maintenance require‐
ments 184
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 85
Maintenance system,
BMW 184
Make-up mirror 138
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 80
Manual air distribu‐
tion 129, 131
Manual air flow 128, 131
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 58
Manual transmission 74
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Maximum cooling 130
Maximum speed, display 86
Maximum speed, winter
tires 172
M Compound brake 150
M differential, active 116
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 115
M double-clutch transmis‐
sion 75
M Dynamic Mode MDM 115
Measurement, units of 92
Medical kit 194
Memory, seat, mirror 56
Menu EfficientDynamics 85
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 88
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, see iDrive operating
concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 80
Microfilter 129, 132
Minimum tread, tires 171
Mirror 57
Mirror memory 56
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 153
Mobility System 173
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 187
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Seite 214
Reference Everything from A to Z
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Mounting of child restraint
systems 62
M technology 150
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia 6
N
Navigation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 54
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 55
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 201
New wheels and tires 171
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 185
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 185
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 125
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 167
Odometer 83
Office 6
Oil 179
Oil, adding 180
Oil additives 181
Oil change 181
Oil change interval, service
requirements 85
Oil filler neck 180
Oil types, alternative 181
Oil types, suitable 181
Old batteries, disposal 191
Onboard computer 88
Onboard computer, see On‐
board computer 88
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 186
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, without
remote control 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 37
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 131
Own Safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 200
Park Distance Control
PDC 121
Parked-car ventilation 132
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 154
Parking aid, see PDC 121
Parking brake 70
Parking lights 93
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 58
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 125
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 121
Personal Profile 36
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 37
Personal Profile, importing
profiles 37
Person warning with City light
braking function 109
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 48
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 46
Plastic, care 201
Power failure 191
Power sunroof, glass 47
Power windows 45
Prescribed engine oil
types 181
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 168
Pressure warning, tires 104
Preventing Auto Start
Stop 69
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 36
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 48
Protective function, win‐
dows 46
Push-and-turn switch, see
Controller 19
R
Racetrack operation 150
Radiator fluid 182
Radio 6
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 34
Radio ready state 65
Rain sensor 72
Ratchet straps, securing
cargo 157
Rear lights 189
Rear socket 139
Rearview camera 124
Rearview mirror 57
Rear window de‐
froster 129, 132
Recirculated-air filter 132
Recirculated-air
mode 128, 131
Recommended fuel
grade 167
Recommended tire
brands 172
Refueling 164
Remaining range 84
Remote control/key 34
Seite 215
Everything from A to Z Reference
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 39
Remote control, univer‐
sal 134
Replacement fuse 191
Replacing parts 186
Replacing wheels/tires 171
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 119
Reserve warning, see
Range 84
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Retreaded tires 172
Roadside parking lights 93
RON recommended fuel
grade 167
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 207
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 158
Rubber components,
care 201
S
Safe braking 153
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 54
Safety belts 53
Safety belts, care 202
Safety systems, airbags 98
Saving fuel 159
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 186
Sealant 173
Seat and mirror memory 56
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 53
Seat heating, front 52
Seating position for chil‐
dren 61
Seats 49
Securing cargo 157
Selection list in instrument
cluster 88
Selector lever 75
Selector lever position 75
Sensors, care 202
Sequential mode 76
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 184
Service requirements, dis‐
play 85
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 194
Services, ConnectedDrive 6
Servotronic 116
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 119
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 43
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 91
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 56
Side airbags 98
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 43
Sitting safely 49
Size 206
Slide/tilt glass roof 47
Snow chains 176
Socket 138
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 185
SOS button 193
Spare fuse 191
Speed, average 89
Speed limit detection 86
Speed limit detection, com‐
puter 90
Speed limits, display 86
Speed warning 90
Split screen 24
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 117
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 90
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 117
Stability control systems 114
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 67
Start/Stop button 65
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 66
Status control display,
tires 102
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 116
Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Steering wheel heating 60
Stopping the engine 67
Storage compartment in the
rear 145
Storage compartments 143
Storage, tires 172
Storing the vehicle 202
Suitable engine oil types 181
Summer tires, tread 171
Sun visor 138
Supplementary text mes‐
sages 82
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 116
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
T
Tachometer 83
Tailgate closing 41
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Tailgate, hotel function 41
Seite 216
Reference Everything from A to Z
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Tailgate opening 40
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 38
Tail lamps 189
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 206
Technology, BMW M 150
Telephone 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 128, 130
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 84
Temperature, engine 89
Terminal, starting aid 195
Text messages, supplemen‐
tary 82
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 44
Thigh support 51
Through-loading system 141
Tilt alarm sensor 45
Time of arrival 90
Tire damage 171
Tire identification marks 169
Tire inflation pressure 168
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 104
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 101
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 173
Tires, changing 171
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 173
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 168
Tire tread 171
Tone 6
Tool 186
Total vehicle weight 207
Touchpad 21
Towing 196
Tow-starting 196
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 101
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 74
Transporting children
safely 61
Tread, tires 171
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 83
Trip onboard computer 90
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 83
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 125
Turn signals, operation 70
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 189
U
Unintentional alarm 45
Units of measurement 92
Universal remote control 134
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
Unlocking, settings 43
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 201
USB interface, general infor‐
mation 139
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 139
V
Vanity mirror 138
Vehicle battery 190
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 190
Vehicle, break-in 152
Vehicle care 200
Vehicle care products 200
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 190
Vehicle paint 200
Vehicle position, GPS loca‐
tion 92
Vehicle storage 202
Vehicle wash 199
Ventilation 132
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 132
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 27
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 80
Warning displays, see Check
Control 80
Warning messages, see
Check Control 80
Warning triangle 194
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 73
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 73
Washer system 71
Washing, vehicle 199
Water on roads 153
Weights 207
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 38
Welcome lights 94
Wheel cleaner 201
Wheels, changing 171
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 168
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 104
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 101
Window defroster,
rear 129, 132
Windows, powered 45
Seite 217
Everything from A to Z Reference
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
Windshield washer fluid 73
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 73
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 71
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 71
Windshield wiper, see wiper
system 71
Winter storage, care 202
Winter tires, suitable
tires 172
Winter tires, tread 171
Wiper 71
Wiper blades, replacing 186
Wiper fluid 73
Wiper, fold-away position 73
Wiper system 71
Wood, care 201
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 26
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 186
X
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 187
Seite 218
Reference Everything from A to Z
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
BMW M
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01 40 2 970 518 ue
*BL297051800M*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 970 518 - II/16
